Release Notes ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module, Series D Catalog Numbers 1756-CNB/D, 1756-CNBR/D About This Publication These release notes cover the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D firmware, revision 7.15 and earlier. Topic Page About This Publication 1 Enhancements 2 Corrected Anomalies 5 ControlLogix I/O Rack Connection Limitations 14 Additional Resources 15
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Release Notes
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
Catalog Numbers 1756-CNBD 1756-CNBRD
About This PublicationThese release notes cover the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D firmware revision 715 and earlier
Topic Page
About This Publication 1
Enhancements 2
Corrected Anomalies 5
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection Limitations 14
Additional Resources 15
2 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
EnhancementsThese enhancements have been made to the firmware
Revision Description
550 Firmware ASSERTs display the firmware revision along with the source file and line numbers
To provide easier diagnostics for the customer the module has changed its failure display when it encounters a failed backplane interface ASIC Instead of displaying a file name and line number the module scrolls the message FAILED BACKPLANE INTERFACE ASIC should a failed backplane interface ASIC be detected
Implemented a more efficient method of processing the CPU utilization resulting in a more accurate value at high utilizations
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 3
544 Provided a more descriptive scrolling message for certain fatal error conditions These include the setting of the node address to zero in any system or to 99 in a redundant system Also not being able to communicate with the backplane ASIC or receiving conflicting data from the backplane ASIC will also produce a scrolling error message
bull ADDRESS SWITCHES = 99 ILLEGAL IN REDUNDANT SYSTEM ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull TIMED OUT WAITING FOR SRM TO POWER-UP AND RELEASE THE BACKPLANE SIGNAL ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH CHASSIS BACKPLANE ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull CONFLICTING RACK SIZE OR SLOT DATA FROM BACKPLANE ASIC ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH BACKPLANE ASIC ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull SRM RESPONDING TO BACKPLANE PING BUT NOT REDUNDANCY CONNECTION ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
539 Changed the n U diagnostic 4-character display to these two displays
bull U c x x where xx is the number of unconnected client buffers up to 20 used by the 1756-CNB module
The display is enabled when usage is 80 or greater and turns off when usage drops below 50 of the available buffers
bull U s x x where xx is the number of unconnected server buffers up to 20 used by the 1756-CNB module
The display is enabled when usage is 80 or greater and turns off when usage drops below 50 of the available buffers
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
4 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
53840 Beginning with this version of the firmware a sub-minor revision will be added to the revision of the firmware (major rev minor rev sub-minor revgt for example 53840) The sub-minor revision number is added to help to better identify and differentiate pre-released products There should be no change in user behaviors when referencing the firmware revisions of released products This number is not printed on the product label however it is scrolled on the displayed upon module powerup
Enhanced the rate at which ControlNet network configuration station status and error counter information is gathered With this enhancement this data will be gathered and updated every 3 seconds to more closely match other system timing such as connection re-establishment
536 Enhanced the internal RAM memory test to improve memory fault coverage
532 The 1756-CNBR modules can now be used with the 1756-CNB IO Configuration entry in RSLogix 5000 under compatible keying
This version of the product is ControlNet International (CI) conformance tested All future releases will continue to be CI-compliant
527 Optimized the 1756-CNBR module for the ControlLogix Redundancy system
Added the ability to present diagnostic information on the 4-character display on the module
Added 16-bit minor fault counters internal to the module for these fault conditions (this feature was introduced in version 522)
bull Bandwidth exceeded ndash increments whenever there are no receive buffers available to handle incoming ControlNet data
bull Network error count ndash increments whenever a lonely or network mismatch condition is detected
bull ControlBus receive error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane error on the module
bull ControlBus address error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane address error on the module
These read-only counters are accessible to ladder programs using CIP generic messaging These counters are continuous and will roll over from 65535 to 0 The counts are reset only at power is applied to the module
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 5
Corrected AnomaliesThese anomalies have been corrected in firmware revisions 715 and earlier
Revision Anomaly Description
715 Single-channel 1756-CNB module at lowest node causes network disruption
Using a single-channel 1756-CNB module as the lowest node on a ControlNet network that has media redundancy configured for channels A and B OR as a B only network may prevent normal network operation Symptoms include
bull Loss of all scheduled connections for the network
bull New devices are prevented from joining the network
bull Module fault with ASSERT smacdrvrc line 3440 showing on the display Lgx00076887
ControlNet network channel media redundancy state not configured correctly
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is the current Active Keeper may not apply the channel media redundancy state correctly after a new RSNetWorx software project has been downloaded Lgx00074794
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
715 Enhancement for new extended status code of 16812
The 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules now report error code 16812 whenever the modulesrsquo node address does not match the expected address Lgx00075549
Power cycle racks caused persistent fault 160304
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is also the current Active Keeper may fail any connections with an error code 16304 No Scheduled Configuration if lower nodes are power cycled just after a major network disruption Lgx00075848
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT smacisrc showing on the display Lgx00077216
OK status indicator remains flashing red
After recovering from a NET ERR condition the OK status indicator may remain flashing red until the first connection has been established through the module Lgx00081279
Fault during flash update
Under very rare conditions the 1756-CNB module may fault with ASSERT icpservc showing on the display during a ControlFLASH update if it has any active connections Lgx00080851
712 Downloading RSNetWorx software project through bridge to 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules fails
The RSNetWorx software project may fail with this error message
Unable to send message to the online active-keeper device due to resource limitations
while performing either a download or an online save when the online path is through a gateway and the last hop is a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module Lgx00066853
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
2 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
EnhancementsThese enhancements have been made to the firmware
Revision Description
550 Firmware ASSERTs display the firmware revision along with the source file and line numbers
To provide easier diagnostics for the customer the module has changed its failure display when it encounters a failed backplane interface ASIC Instead of displaying a file name and line number the module scrolls the message FAILED BACKPLANE INTERFACE ASIC should a failed backplane interface ASIC be detected
Implemented a more efficient method of processing the CPU utilization resulting in a more accurate value at high utilizations
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 3
544 Provided a more descriptive scrolling message for certain fatal error conditions These include the setting of the node address to zero in any system or to 99 in a redundant system Also not being able to communicate with the backplane ASIC or receiving conflicting data from the backplane ASIC will also produce a scrolling error message
bull ADDRESS SWITCHES = 99 ILLEGAL IN REDUNDANT SYSTEM ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull TIMED OUT WAITING FOR SRM TO POWER-UP AND RELEASE THE BACKPLANE SIGNAL ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH CHASSIS BACKPLANE ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull CONFLICTING RACK SIZE OR SLOT DATA FROM BACKPLANE ASIC ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH BACKPLANE ASIC ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull SRM RESPONDING TO BACKPLANE PING BUT NOT REDUNDANCY CONNECTION ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
539 Changed the n U diagnostic 4-character display to these two displays
bull U c x x where xx is the number of unconnected client buffers up to 20 used by the 1756-CNB module
The display is enabled when usage is 80 or greater and turns off when usage drops below 50 of the available buffers
bull U s x x where xx is the number of unconnected server buffers up to 20 used by the 1756-CNB module
The display is enabled when usage is 80 or greater and turns off when usage drops below 50 of the available buffers
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
4 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
53840 Beginning with this version of the firmware a sub-minor revision will be added to the revision of the firmware (major rev minor rev sub-minor revgt for example 53840) The sub-minor revision number is added to help to better identify and differentiate pre-released products There should be no change in user behaviors when referencing the firmware revisions of released products This number is not printed on the product label however it is scrolled on the displayed upon module powerup
Enhanced the rate at which ControlNet network configuration station status and error counter information is gathered With this enhancement this data will be gathered and updated every 3 seconds to more closely match other system timing such as connection re-establishment
536 Enhanced the internal RAM memory test to improve memory fault coverage
532 The 1756-CNBR modules can now be used with the 1756-CNB IO Configuration entry in RSLogix 5000 under compatible keying
This version of the product is ControlNet International (CI) conformance tested All future releases will continue to be CI-compliant
527 Optimized the 1756-CNBR module for the ControlLogix Redundancy system
Added the ability to present diagnostic information on the 4-character display on the module
Added 16-bit minor fault counters internal to the module for these fault conditions (this feature was introduced in version 522)
bull Bandwidth exceeded ndash increments whenever there are no receive buffers available to handle incoming ControlNet data
bull Network error count ndash increments whenever a lonely or network mismatch condition is detected
bull ControlBus receive error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane error on the module
bull ControlBus address error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane address error on the module
These read-only counters are accessible to ladder programs using CIP generic messaging These counters are continuous and will roll over from 65535 to 0 The counts are reset only at power is applied to the module
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 5
Corrected AnomaliesThese anomalies have been corrected in firmware revisions 715 and earlier
Revision Anomaly Description
715 Single-channel 1756-CNB module at lowest node causes network disruption
Using a single-channel 1756-CNB module as the lowest node on a ControlNet network that has media redundancy configured for channels A and B OR as a B only network may prevent normal network operation Symptoms include
bull Loss of all scheduled connections for the network
bull New devices are prevented from joining the network
bull Module fault with ASSERT smacdrvrc line 3440 showing on the display Lgx00076887
ControlNet network channel media redundancy state not configured correctly
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is the current Active Keeper may not apply the channel media redundancy state correctly after a new RSNetWorx software project has been downloaded Lgx00074794
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
715 Enhancement for new extended status code of 16812
The 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules now report error code 16812 whenever the modulesrsquo node address does not match the expected address Lgx00075549
Power cycle racks caused persistent fault 160304
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is also the current Active Keeper may fail any connections with an error code 16304 No Scheduled Configuration if lower nodes are power cycled just after a major network disruption Lgx00075848
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT smacisrc showing on the display Lgx00077216
OK status indicator remains flashing red
After recovering from a NET ERR condition the OK status indicator may remain flashing red until the first connection has been established through the module Lgx00081279
Fault during flash update
Under very rare conditions the 1756-CNB module may fault with ASSERT icpservc showing on the display during a ControlFLASH update if it has any active connections Lgx00080851
712 Downloading RSNetWorx software project through bridge to 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules fails
The RSNetWorx software project may fail with this error message
Unable to send message to the online active-keeper device due to resource limitations
while performing either a download or an online save when the online path is through a gateway and the last hop is a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module Lgx00066853
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 3
544 Provided a more descriptive scrolling message for certain fatal error conditions These include the setting of the node address to zero in any system or to 99 in a redundant system Also not being able to communicate with the backplane ASIC or receiving conflicting data from the backplane ASIC will also produce a scrolling error message
bull ADDRESS SWITCHES = 99 ILLEGAL IN REDUNDANT SYSTEM ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull TIMED OUT WAITING FOR SRM TO POWER-UP AND RELEASE THE BACKPLANE SIGNAL ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH CHASSIS BACKPLANE ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull CONFLICTING RACK SIZE OR SLOT DATA FROM BACKPLANE ASIC ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH BACKPLANE ASIC ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
bull SRM RESPONDING TO BACKPLANE PING BUT NOT REDUNDANCY CONNECTION ltfile namegt ltline numbergt
539 Changed the n U diagnostic 4-character display to these two displays
bull U c x x where xx is the number of unconnected client buffers up to 20 used by the 1756-CNB module
The display is enabled when usage is 80 or greater and turns off when usage drops below 50 of the available buffers
bull U s x x where xx is the number of unconnected server buffers up to 20 used by the 1756-CNB module
The display is enabled when usage is 80 or greater and turns off when usage drops below 50 of the available buffers
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
4 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
53840 Beginning with this version of the firmware a sub-minor revision will be added to the revision of the firmware (major rev minor rev sub-minor revgt for example 53840) The sub-minor revision number is added to help to better identify and differentiate pre-released products There should be no change in user behaviors when referencing the firmware revisions of released products This number is not printed on the product label however it is scrolled on the displayed upon module powerup
Enhanced the rate at which ControlNet network configuration station status and error counter information is gathered With this enhancement this data will be gathered and updated every 3 seconds to more closely match other system timing such as connection re-establishment
536 Enhanced the internal RAM memory test to improve memory fault coverage
532 The 1756-CNBR modules can now be used with the 1756-CNB IO Configuration entry in RSLogix 5000 under compatible keying
This version of the product is ControlNet International (CI) conformance tested All future releases will continue to be CI-compliant
527 Optimized the 1756-CNBR module for the ControlLogix Redundancy system
Added the ability to present diagnostic information on the 4-character display on the module
Added 16-bit minor fault counters internal to the module for these fault conditions (this feature was introduced in version 522)
bull Bandwidth exceeded ndash increments whenever there are no receive buffers available to handle incoming ControlNet data
bull Network error count ndash increments whenever a lonely or network mismatch condition is detected
bull ControlBus receive error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane error on the module
bull ControlBus address error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane address error on the module
These read-only counters are accessible to ladder programs using CIP generic messaging These counters are continuous and will roll over from 65535 to 0 The counts are reset only at power is applied to the module
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 5
Corrected AnomaliesThese anomalies have been corrected in firmware revisions 715 and earlier
Revision Anomaly Description
715 Single-channel 1756-CNB module at lowest node causes network disruption
Using a single-channel 1756-CNB module as the lowest node on a ControlNet network that has media redundancy configured for channels A and B OR as a B only network may prevent normal network operation Symptoms include
bull Loss of all scheduled connections for the network
bull New devices are prevented from joining the network
bull Module fault with ASSERT smacdrvrc line 3440 showing on the display Lgx00076887
ControlNet network channel media redundancy state not configured correctly
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is the current Active Keeper may not apply the channel media redundancy state correctly after a new RSNetWorx software project has been downloaded Lgx00074794
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
715 Enhancement for new extended status code of 16812
The 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules now report error code 16812 whenever the modulesrsquo node address does not match the expected address Lgx00075549
Power cycle racks caused persistent fault 160304
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is also the current Active Keeper may fail any connections with an error code 16304 No Scheduled Configuration if lower nodes are power cycled just after a major network disruption Lgx00075848
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT smacisrc showing on the display Lgx00077216
OK status indicator remains flashing red
After recovering from a NET ERR condition the OK status indicator may remain flashing red until the first connection has been established through the module Lgx00081279
Fault during flash update
Under very rare conditions the 1756-CNB module may fault with ASSERT icpservc showing on the display during a ControlFLASH update if it has any active connections Lgx00080851
712 Downloading RSNetWorx software project through bridge to 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules fails
The RSNetWorx software project may fail with this error message
Unable to send message to the online active-keeper device due to resource limitations
while performing either a download or an online save when the online path is through a gateway and the last hop is a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module Lgx00066853
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
4 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
53840 Beginning with this version of the firmware a sub-minor revision will be added to the revision of the firmware (major rev minor rev sub-minor revgt for example 53840) The sub-minor revision number is added to help to better identify and differentiate pre-released products There should be no change in user behaviors when referencing the firmware revisions of released products This number is not printed on the product label however it is scrolled on the displayed upon module powerup
Enhanced the rate at which ControlNet network configuration station status and error counter information is gathered With this enhancement this data will be gathered and updated every 3 seconds to more closely match other system timing such as connection re-establishment
536 Enhanced the internal RAM memory test to improve memory fault coverage
532 The 1756-CNBR modules can now be used with the 1756-CNB IO Configuration entry in RSLogix 5000 under compatible keying
This version of the product is ControlNet International (CI) conformance tested All future releases will continue to be CI-compliant
527 Optimized the 1756-CNBR module for the ControlLogix Redundancy system
Added the ability to present diagnostic information on the 4-character display on the module
Added 16-bit minor fault counters internal to the module for these fault conditions (this feature was introduced in version 522)
bull Bandwidth exceeded ndash increments whenever there are no receive buffers available to handle incoming ControlNet data
bull Network error count ndash increments whenever a lonely or network mismatch condition is detected
bull ControlBus receive error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane error on the module
bull ControlBus address error count ndash increments whenever the 1756-CNB module detects a backplane address error on the module
These read-only counters are accessible to ladder programs using CIP generic messaging These counters are continuous and will roll over from 65535 to 0 The counts are reset only at power is applied to the module
Revision Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 5
Corrected AnomaliesThese anomalies have been corrected in firmware revisions 715 and earlier
Revision Anomaly Description
715 Single-channel 1756-CNB module at lowest node causes network disruption
Using a single-channel 1756-CNB module as the lowest node on a ControlNet network that has media redundancy configured for channels A and B OR as a B only network may prevent normal network operation Symptoms include
bull Loss of all scheduled connections for the network
bull New devices are prevented from joining the network
bull Module fault with ASSERT smacdrvrc line 3440 showing on the display Lgx00076887
ControlNet network channel media redundancy state not configured correctly
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is the current Active Keeper may not apply the channel media redundancy state correctly after a new RSNetWorx software project has been downloaded Lgx00074794
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
715 Enhancement for new extended status code of 16812
The 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules now report error code 16812 whenever the modulesrsquo node address does not match the expected address Lgx00075549
Power cycle racks caused persistent fault 160304
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is also the current Active Keeper may fail any connections with an error code 16304 No Scheduled Configuration if lower nodes are power cycled just after a major network disruption Lgx00075848
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT smacisrc showing on the display Lgx00077216
OK status indicator remains flashing red
After recovering from a NET ERR condition the OK status indicator may remain flashing red until the first connection has been established through the module Lgx00081279
Fault during flash update
Under very rare conditions the 1756-CNB module may fault with ASSERT icpservc showing on the display during a ControlFLASH update if it has any active connections Lgx00080851
712 Downloading RSNetWorx software project through bridge to 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules fails
The RSNetWorx software project may fail with this error message
Unable to send message to the online active-keeper device due to resource limitations
while performing either a download or an online save when the online path is through a gateway and the last hop is a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module Lgx00066853
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 5
Corrected AnomaliesThese anomalies have been corrected in firmware revisions 715 and earlier
Revision Anomaly Description
715 Single-channel 1756-CNB module at lowest node causes network disruption
Using a single-channel 1756-CNB module as the lowest node on a ControlNet network that has media redundancy configured for channels A and B OR as a B only network may prevent normal network operation Symptoms include
bull Loss of all scheduled connections for the network
bull New devices are prevented from joining the network
bull Module fault with ASSERT smacdrvrc line 3440 showing on the display Lgx00076887
ControlNet network channel media redundancy state not configured correctly
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is the current Active Keeper may not apply the channel media redundancy state correctly after a new RSNetWorx software project has been downloaded Lgx00074794
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
6 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
715 Enhancement for new extended status code of 16812
The 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules now report error code 16812 whenever the modulesrsquo node address does not match the expected address Lgx00075549
Power cycle racks caused persistent fault 160304
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is also the current Active Keeper may fail any connections with an error code 16304 No Scheduled Configuration if lower nodes are power cycled just after a major network disruption Lgx00075848
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT smacisrc showing on the display Lgx00077216
OK status indicator remains flashing red
After recovering from a NET ERR condition the OK status indicator may remain flashing red until the first connection has been established through the module Lgx00081279
Fault during flash update
Under very rare conditions the 1756-CNB module may fault with ASSERT icpservc showing on the display during a ControlFLASH update if it has any active connections Lgx00080851
712 Downloading RSNetWorx software project through bridge to 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules fails
The RSNetWorx software project may fail with this error message
Unable to send message to the online active-keeper device due to resource limitations
while performing either a download or an online save when the online path is through a gateway and the last hop is a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module Lgx00066853
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
6 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
715 Enhancement for new extended status code of 16812
The 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules now report error code 16812 whenever the modulesrsquo node address does not match the expected address Lgx00075549
Power cycle racks caused persistent fault 160304
A 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module that is also the current Active Keeper may fail any connections with an error code 16304 No Scheduled Configuration if lower nodes are power cycled just after a major network disruption Lgx00075848
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT smacisrc showing on the display Lgx00077216
OK status indicator remains flashing red
After recovering from a NET ERR condition the OK status indicator may remain flashing red until the first connection has been established through the module Lgx00081279
Fault during flash update
Under very rare conditions the 1756-CNB module may fault with ASSERT icpservc showing on the display during a ControlFLASH update if it has any active connections Lgx00080851
712 Downloading RSNetWorx software project through bridge to 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules fails
The RSNetWorx software project may fail with this error message
Unable to send message to the online active-keeper device due to resource limitations
while performing either a download or an online save when the online path is through a gateway and the last hop is a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module Lgx00066853
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 7
711 An incorrectly configured outbound MSG can cause all inbound messages to fail with error 16204
An incorrectly configured outbound MSG may cause problems if the 1756-CNB module is also receiving a large number of unconnected messages through the ControlNet network
Specific conditions for the anomaly include
bull Outbound MSG configured as Unconnected
bull The outbound MSG configured with the 1756-CNB modulersquos own ControlNet network node address in the communication path
bull MSG is sent when all ControlNet incoming unconnected buffers are in use
Each time all of the above conditions are met the 1756-CNB module will lose one of its incoming unconnected buffers Incoming messages performance may slowly degrade until all buffers are lost at which point all incoming unconnected messages will begin to fail with an error code 16204 Lgx00064807
Module fault under heavy unscheduled load
Module may rarely fault with ASSERT fifoc line 0744 showing on the display when five or more unscheduled packets are to be sent at the same time Lgx00063510
710 Module no longer responds to network traffic
After recovering from a major network disruption the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules may become unresponsive to network traffic Lgx00063368
Transmission of scheduled data delayed by one Network Update Time (NUT)
After a major network disruption the transmission of scheduled data may be permanently delayed by one network interval Lgx00061468
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
8 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
710 Changes in electronic keying
A redundant media 1756-CNBR module can no longer replace a non-redundant media 1756-CNB module if a connection specifies the electronic keying to be exact match
Module freezes when using Add IO Online
The 1756-CNB module may become unresponsive with the display frozen when you use the Add IO Online feature This occurs when the connection is configured as a multi-hop connection Lgx00058180
Fault due to unterminated ControlNet network cable
Leaving the ControlNet network unterminated for long periods of time may cause the 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules to fault with ASSERT icn_ucmm showing on the display
Module fault when using Add IO Online and Change of State
Module may fault with ASSERT icpintc line 294 showing on the display when using unscheduled connections that send data rapidly on the backplane
All the following conditions must be true
bull Module added to IO tree using Add IO Online feature
bull Module configured for Change of State
bull Rapid changes in module inputs trigger rapid data production Lgx00058434
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 9
550 Illegal ControlNet network schedule
An illegal ControlNet network schedule can be imposed on a network after a project is downloaded to a Logix controller After the download the illegal schedule may require a 1756-CNB module on the network to transmit more data in a single Network Update Time (NUT) than ControlNet network specifications allow Revision 550 will fail the module when an illegal schedule is detected however a more descriptive message will be scrolled across the 1756-CNB display The display will scroll FAULT Rev 550 Build 010 SCHEDULE LIMIT REACHED INHIBIT CONNECTIONS RESET MODULE THEN RESCHEDULE
This message indicates the steps you need to take to recover from this condition Some of the connections through this 1756-CNB module have to be inhibited so that the 1756-CNB module can be reset and rejoin the network without again detecting the problem and faulting Once the connections are inhibited the 1756-CNB module can be safely reset and the network rescheduled Once the network is rescheduled to a valid configuration the connections can be uninhibited Be sure to save the project
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
10 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
550 1756-CNB module assert during network disruption
When a 1756-CNB module goes lonely the module could assert when messages are received from the backplane This version includes a fix that properly handles this backplane traffic
Module may assert in smacisrc during ControlNet network disruption - After a network disruption the module now waits for the communications chip to reset before allowing traffic to be received
Module may assert in icn_ucmmc during ControlNet network disruption - If a retry to an unconnected request is received at the same time the original reply is being sent the module may assert
Delay in sending scheduled data
When operating with a fully loaded schedule the 1756-CNB module may delay in sending scheduled data by one network interval Modified the firmware to more efficiently guarantee data delivery according to the network schedule
NET ERR display 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR modules with firmware revisions later than 53910 may permanently display NET ERROR after either a major network disruption or a complete system power cycle While the module is in this state no communication is possible for any device on the same network
UCMM server count The number of UCMM servers being displayed on the 1756-CNB module does not match the number of servers being used The number of UCMM servers was not being decremented when they timed out leaving the count out of sync with the number actually being used
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 11
550 Multiple products coming on line together
If a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module and a 1407-CGCM module were power cycled together on the same ControlNet network occasionally the 1407-CGCM module would not complete going on line to the ControlNet network and would not acknowledge network traffic The initializing 1756-CNB module was broadcasting a reply message instead of sending it specifically to the requested node The reply is no longer broadcast
NET ERR permanently displayed and network permanently disabled
Applying power to a 1756-CNB module as low node on a network that is running unconfigured network parameters would cause the 1756-CNB module to permanently display NET ERR as well as permanently disable the network The 1756-CNB module now correctly goes through the network attachment sequence without disrupting other nodes
After 497 days of uninterrupted module operation an internal counter that tracks unscheduled message connection time-outs rolls over When the rollover occurs the ControlNet module no longer manages connections as expected and the modulersquos unconnected buffers eventually become unavailable You must cycle power or reset the module to restart the counter
Controller major Fault due to power-up timing
If you used a 1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module with firmware revision 54510 enabled Major Fault on connection loss and cycled power to the system the controller experienced a major fault Changes in the power-up procedure of the 1756-CNB module with firmware revisions later than 53910 may delay the establishment of connections and cause the controller to major fault after a power cycle This version significantly shortens the power-up time of the 1756-CNB module so that connections can be established before the controller major faults
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
12 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
544 Dropped connections
When module utilization exceeds 90 and large amounts of unscheduled traffic exists the network experiences dropped connections Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled connection management
Incorrect scheduling When module utilization exceeds 90 the module could incorrectly send scheduled traffic Modified module operation to guarantee proper scheduled traffic integrity
Last two bytes of a full 510 byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten
Rarely an anomaly could occur where the last two bytes of a full 510-byte scheduled MAC frame may be overwritten A 510-byte MAC frame is the largest achievable scheduled communication from a node in any one Network Update Time (NUT) Refer to Tech Note G91952649 in Rockwell Automationrsquos Knowledgebase at httpwwwrockwellautomationcomknowledgebase
Delayed forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API)
Under certain timing conditions the 1756-CNB module delays forwarding scheduled data by one Actual Packet Interval (API) We modified the module to handle this condition
53840 Redundancy Corrected anomalies related to ControlLogix Redundancy systems
537 Scheduled data timing
Corrected an anomaly in which on rare occasions scheduled data connections timed out or scheduled data were sent on the wrong ControlNet network update time (NUT) On very rare occasions this condition could persist for a few NUT cycles and potentially result in a connection timeout Connections would then be automatically re-established by the controller
The connection timeout and automatic reconnection process yields a connection loss of approximately three seconds During this time affected IO connections use their fault states
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 13
536 Redundancy Corrected several system redundancy related issues with the 1756-CNB and 1756-CNBR modules
532 Handling delayed ACK messages
Improved the tolerance of the 1756-CNB module to handle delayed ACK messages from third party devices
Node address verified
The 1756-CNB module now verifies the node address when doing forward open signature checks
Improved recovery times
Corrected long recovery times for connections after multiple connection interruptions
ASSERT errors Corrected the ASSERT in redunobc error This typically occurs when the module is in a rack containing a large number of controller 1756-CNB or 1756-DNB modules
Corrected the ASSERT in smacdrvrc line 2042 error
NET ERR state Corrected the problem of the module stuck in NET ERR state
527 Module access error Accessing a 1756-CNB module as a PLC-5 processor from RSView software caused a red light and an exception handlers ASSERT error
ASSERT error A 1756-CNB keeper ASSERT error was intermittently seen at node 1 at powerup The workaround prior to this repair was to change the 1756-CNB module node address to something other than 1
An ASSERT in txlistc error was intermittently seen on a two-node network when a cable was broken
Failure to form two-node network
A 1784-PCICS card and a single-media 1756-CNB module failed to form a two-node network
Mismatch error RSNetWorx software would display On-LineOff-Line Mismatch continuously even after saving the latest edits successfully
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
14 ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D
ControlLogix IO Rack Connection LimitationsWhen using ControlLogix IO with a remote ControlNet network adapter (1756-CNB or 1756-CNBR module) as many as five controllers can create rack optimization connections to the ControlNet adapter All subsequent rack connection requests will fail
It is possible that more than one ControlLogix controller can configure the same remote 1756-CNB module for rack optimization since each RSLogix 5000 software project configures the IO for only one ControlLogix controller As many as five ControlLogix controllers can communicate to the same 1756-CNB (or 1756-CNBR) module via a rack optimization connection
If more than five ControlLogix controllers configure the same 1756-CNB module for rack optimization RSNetWorx for ControlNet software will schedule the network but only five ControlLogix controllers will communicate to that 1756-CNB module The RSLogix 5000 software project files for the ControlLogix controllers that fail to communicate to that 1756-CNB module will show that 1756-CNB module as faulted with the message 16011a Connection Request Error Out of Connection Resources showing on the module display
527 CPU utilization calculation
Corrected the manner in which the CPU utilization was calculated Previous values were high by as much as 10 in the 10 CPU utilization range The error reduced linearly by 1 for each 10 increment in CPU utilization and therefore was high by only 1 in the 90 CPU utilization range
Revision Anomaly Description
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D 15
Additional ResourcesThese documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products
You can view or download publications at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
Resource Description
ControlLogix ControlNet Bridge Module Series C and D Installation Instructions publication 1756-IN571
Provides guidelines for installing ControlNet single-media and redundant bridge modules
ControlLogix Redundancy System User Manual publication 1756-UM523
Guides the design development and implementation of a redundancy system for a ControlLogix controller
ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide publication CNET-IN002
Provides ControlNet network planning information
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system
Product Certifications website httpwwwabcom
Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Publication 1756-RN587I-EN-P - April 2009 PN-43709
Rockwell Automation SupportRockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation AssistanceIf you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your product up and running
New Product Satisfaction ReturnRockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 RSView RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
United States 14406463434 Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure
Supersedes Publication 1756-RN587H-EN-P - June 2005 Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
1756-RN587I-EN-P ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Module Series D Release Notes
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1756-RN587IEN-P
ControlLogix ControlNet Interface ModuleSeries D Release Notes
EA
1
NA
Marketing Commercial
CMKMKE CM Integrated Arch - 19021
04302009
5
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
16
8
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
475
7
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
HALF
55 x 85
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN-43709
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
5
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
14
3LEFT
LEFT
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
NA
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
825
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
NA
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
100 Gloss Cover
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
100
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4